‫‪1307‬‬

‫دا
‪ 
32‬ا ‪ 2‬‬
‫ا ‪
7‬‬

‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮏ‪١‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮان‬
‫ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ‪1 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪4 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪6 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ‪8 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻲ‪11 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ‪14 ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ‪17 ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ )ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ(‪20 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﺮﺥ ﻣﺎﮐﺴﻮﻝ‪22 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪24 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﺭﻳﻮﺕ‪27 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‪30 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻤﻲﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪33 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ‪35 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺑﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪37 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‪38 ................................................................................................‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻧﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮏ ‪ ،١‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﺰ ‪١٣٩٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮐﻼﺱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﮔﻲ‪:‬‬
 ‫رﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮن و ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫اﻧﻮاع ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺘﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ )ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ )ﺁﻣﭙﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ )ﮐﻠﻮﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ )ﻣﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺷﻤﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻭ‪...‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪cgs‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪SI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١ m =١٠ cm‬‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪L, l‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪١ kg =١٠٣ g‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪kg‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪M, m‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫‪---------‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪T, t‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪١ m 2 =١٠٤ cm 2‬‬ ‫‪cm 2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪L2‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‬

‫‪١ m 3 =١٠٦ cm 3‬‬ ‫‪cm 3‬‬ ‫‪m3‬‬ ‫‪L3‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬

‫‪١ m / s =١٠٢ cm / s‬‬ ‫‪cm / s‬‬ ‫‪m/ s‬‬ ‫‪LT −1‬‬ ‫‪V,v‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫‪١ m / s 2 =١٠٢ cm / s 2‬‬ ‫‪cm / s 2‬‬ ‫‪m / s2‬‬ ‫‪LT −2‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫‪---------‬‬ ‫‪rad‬‬ ‫‪rad‬‬ ‫‪-------‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬
‫‪---------‬‬ ‫‪rad / s‬‬ ‫‪rad / s‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪ω‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪---------‬‬ ‫‪rad / s 2‬‬ ‫‪rad / s 2‬‬ ‫‪T −2‬‬ ‫‪α‬‬ ‫ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪---------‬‬ ‫‪Hz‬‬ ‫‪Hz‬‬ ‫‪T −1‬‬ ‫‪f ,υ‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫‪١ N =١٠٥ dyn‬‬ ‫‪dyn‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪M L T −2‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪١ kg m / s =١٠ g cm / s‬‬ ‫‪g cm / s‬‬ ‫‪kg m / s‬‬ ‫‪M LT‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫‪١ N .S =١٠٥ dyn.s‬‬ ‫‪dyn.s‬‬ ‫‪N .S‬‬ ‫‪M LT‬‬ ‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬

‫‪١ kg / m 3 =١٠-٣ g / cm 3‬‬ ‫‪g / cm 3‬‬ ‫‪kg / m 3‬‬ ‫‪M L −3‬‬ ‫‪ρ‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ‬
‫‪١ N / kg =١٠٢ dyn / g‬‬ ‫‪dyn / g‬‬ ‫‪N / kg‬‬ ‫‪LT‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺶ‬
‫‪١ N / m =١٠٣ dyn / cm‬‬ ‫‪dyn / cm‬‬ ‫‪N /m‬‬ ‫‪MT‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﻓﻨﺮ‬

‫‪١ N. m =١٠٧ dyn. cm‬‬ ‫‪dyn. cm‬‬ ‫‪N. m‬‬ ‫‪M L 2T‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪τ‬‬ ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬

‫‪١ kg m 2 =١٠٧ g cm 2‬‬ ‫‪g cm 2‬‬ ‫‪kg m 2‬‬ ‫‪ML2‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪١ kg m 2 / s =١٠٧ g cm 2 / s‬‬ ‫‪g cm 2 / s‬‬ ‫‪kg m 2 / s‬‬ ‫‪M L 2T‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪١ J =١٠٧ erg‬‬ ‫‪erg‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪M L 2T‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬ ‫‪W,E‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ‬
‫‪١ W =١٠٧ erg / s‬‬ ‫‪erg / s‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺕ ‪W‬‬ ‫‪M L 2T‬‬ ‫‪−3‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫‪١ m 3 / s =١٠٦ cm 3 / s‬‬ ‫‪cm 3 / s‬‬ ‫‪m3 / s‬‬ ‫‪L 3T‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺩﺑﯽ‬

‫‪١ Pa =١٠ dyn / cm 2‬‬ ‫‪dyn / cm 2‬‬ ‫‪Pa‬‬ ‫‪M L −1 T‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫دﻗﺖ و ﺻﺤﺖ‪ :‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﻛﻮﻟﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠/٠٠٥‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠/٠١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠/١‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ارﻗﺎم ﺑﺎﻣﻌﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ" ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪٢٧/٣٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٢٧/٣‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢٧/٣٠٠‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
 ‫رﺳﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻨﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﺮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ (٠‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪∆ y‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ )ﺣﺘﻲﺍﻻﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪tg θ‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪∆ x‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻄﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ∆ y‬ﻭ ‪ ∆ x‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫رﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮن‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ " ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ" ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫_‬
‫) ‪Σ ( xi − x)( yi − y‬‬ ‫_‬

‫‪y = ax+ b :‬‬ ‫=‪a‬‬ ‫_‬

‫‪, b= y−ax‬‬
‫)‪Σ ( xi − x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ (٠‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Σ xi yi‬‬
‫‪y = ax :‬‬ ‫= ‪a‬‬
‫‪Σ xi‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫روش ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎت‪:‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻄﻬﺎﻱ ‪ d i‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪∂ f‬‬
‫‪ ∂ a = 0‬‬
‫‪f (a, b) = ∑ d i‬‬ ‫‪= ∑ ( y i − ( ax i + b )) = Minimum ⇒ ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪∂ f = 0‬‬
‫‪ ∂ b‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫رﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮن در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺣﺴﺎب‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪Mode‬‬ ‫‪REG‬‬ ‫‪Lin‬‬ ‫‪x i ,y i + M +‬‬ ‫‪SHIFT+ S-VAR‬‬ ‫)=‪A (١‬‬ ‫)=‪B (٢‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
 ‫ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺧﻄﺎ‪ -١ :‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‪ -٢ .‬ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ -٣ .‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎي ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ' ‪ X‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪∆X = X − X ′‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪X = X ′± ∆X‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪار واﻗﻌﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺅﻳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪−∆ X‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪+∆ X‬‬

‫ﺧﻄﺎي ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪) δ‬ﺩﻟﺘﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆X‬‬
‫= ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﻧﺴﺒﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫درﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺩﺭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ %‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎ ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ × ١٠٠ % .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ = ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻪ روش ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪X i′‬‬ ‫‪X − X i′‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫‪X 1′‬‬ ‫‪X − X 1′‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮐﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪X 2′‬‬ ‫‪X − X 2′‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ X i′‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬
‫‪∆X‬‬ ‫‪X − X i′‬‬ ‫‪Σ X i′‬‬
‫‪X n′‬‬ ‫‪X − X n′‬‬ ‫‪∆ X = X − X i′‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫= ‪X‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻪ روش ﻟﮕﺎرﻳﺘﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﮐﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﮐﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻔﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻳﻦﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫‪∆X ∆a + ∆b‬‬
‫‪X = a ± b ⇒ ∆X = ∆a + ∆b ,‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪a ±b‬‬
‫‪∆X ∆a ∆b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b∆a + a∆b‬‬ ‫‪∆X ∆a ∆b‬‬
‫‪X = ab ⇒ ∆X = b∆a + a∆b ,‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫=‪X‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ ∆X‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‪ Ln‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ‪ dX‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪dX da db‬‬ ‫‪∆X ∆a ∆b‬‬
‫⇒ ‪X = ab ⇒ Ln X = Lna + Lnb‬‬‫‪= +‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪= +‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﺟﺰﺋﻲ ‪ ∆X‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪X a b‬‬ ‫‪X a b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪dX da db‬‬ ‫‪∆X ∆a ∆b‬‬
‫=‪X‬‬ ‫⇒ ‪⇒ Ln X = Lna − Lnb‬‬ ‫‪= −‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪= +‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪a b‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪a b‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎي ﻣﻄﻠﻖ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
 ‫ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ )آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻠﻴﭽﺮ ﺗﺮوﻟﻲ(‬

‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺷﺘﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺴﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﯼ ‪ F‬ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫=‪a‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ‬

‫‪T‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﻭ ﺭﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :5‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ m‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ‪ a‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪mg − f = ( m + M ) a‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪M : T − f = Ma ‬‬
‫‪ ⇒ mg − f = ( m + M ) a‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪m : mg − T = ma ‬‬

‫‪mg‬‬
‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫)‪t(s‬‬ ‫= ) ‪V(cm / s‬‬ ‫‪V −V‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺧﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬ ‫)‪( x = 50 cm‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆V‬‬
‫= ‪∆V = V − V‬‬ ‫= ‪× 100‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
 ‫ب‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺘﺎﺑﺪار و ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﺻﻄﻜﺎك‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺷﺘﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺧﮏ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪x(cm‬‬ ‫)‪t(s‬‬ ‫)‪t²(s²‬‬ ‫) ‪a(cm / s 2‬‬ ‫‪a −a‬‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ ، x = at 2‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ x‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ t²‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪a‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ ، mg − f = (m + M )a‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪ M = 80 g‬ﻭ ‪( m = 20 g‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‪a‬‬ ‫=‪⇒a‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪mg − f = (m + M )a ⇒ f‬‬
‫‪∆a‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆a = a − a‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ؟‬

‫‪ -٢‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -٣‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ)‪ (dyn‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ )‪ (N‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﻭ ﺭﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ؟‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دوراﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ f‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ M‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﮔﺬﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫‪V2‬‬
‫‪ F = m‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪V‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ F‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪= m rω 2‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ‪ ω‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪dV‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪F = ma = m‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬ ‫) ‪d ( rω‬‬ ‫‪dr‬‬ ‫‪V2‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪ω‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪ω‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪= mr ω 2 :‬‬
‫) ‪dx d ( r θ‬‬ ‫‪dθ‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫= ‪V‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=r‬‬ ‫‪= rω ‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﮔﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﮔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺩﺭﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪،‬‬

‫‪Mr‬‬
‫‪ T = 2π‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ T‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪mg + f‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ M‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪mg + f‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪mg + f‬‬ ‫‪Mr‬‬
‫= ‪mg + f = M rω 2 ⇒ ω 2‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ T = 2π‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪mg + f‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ M‬ﮐﻤﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ :‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﮐﺰﮔﺮﺍ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﻨﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﭼﺸﻤﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ M‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺨﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻤﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺴﻢ ‪ M‬ﮐﻤﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ ،r‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ T‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،r‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪ T ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ ،r‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎﮊ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ m=١٠g) .‬ﻭ ‪(M=٩٠g‬‬

‫)‪r (cm‬‬ ‫‪١٠T‬‬ ‫)‪T(s‬‬ ‫)‪T ٢ (s٢‬‬ ‫)‪f (dyn‬‬ ‫‪f −f‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫( ‪ ، T 2 = 4π 2‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‬
‫‪mg + f‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪ T ٢‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ‪ r‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪4π 2 M‬‬
‫( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪f‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ )‬
‫‪mg + f‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ M‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ f‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪4π 2 M‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ f‬‬
‫‪mg + f‬‬
‫‪∆f‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆f = f − f‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ‪ ،M‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺵ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫آوﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬

‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ T = 2π‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ g‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫‪Mg DG‬‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﮑﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ I‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ : I = ∑ m i ri 2 = ∫ r 2 dm‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢﮐﻞ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪m 1 x 1+ m 2 x 2 + L‬‬
‫= ‪ : (m 1 + m 2 + L) xG = m 1 x 1 + m 2 x 2 + L ⇒ xG‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪m 1+ m 2 + L‬‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬
‫‪T = 2π‬‬ ‫‪ T = 2π‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M g DG‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ I‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪ M ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﮐﻞ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﻭ ‪ DG‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ M‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‪ τ ،‬ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫‪τ =r×F‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪DG‬‬ ‫‪d θ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪d 2θ‬‬ ‫‪d 2θ‬‬ ‫‪MgD G‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫) ‪τ = I( 2‬‬ ‫⇒ ‪ ⇒ I ( 2 ) = − D G Mg sin θ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫(‪+‬‬ ‫‪)θ = 0‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫‪θ ≤ 6 ° ⇒ sin θ ≈ θ ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪θ = θ 0 cos ω t‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ ω‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪MgD G‬‬ ‫‪MgD G‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪MgD G‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫( = ‪ω2‬‬ ‫= ‪)⇒ω‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ T = 2π‬‬
‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪MgD G‬‬
‫‪L2‬‬
‫‪I = M (D 2 +‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ M‬ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ‪ L‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ D‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ )‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ ) ‪ ،( L = ٠‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ I = M D 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪I = ∫ r 2 dM ‬‬ ‫‪L 2‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪M r3‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫‪dM‬‬ ‫⇒ ‪dr ‬‬ ‫‪I = ∫r‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪dr‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫) ‪( L 32 − L 13‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪L 3‬‬ ‫‪3L‬‬
‫‪L ‬‬
‫‪L1‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪L 3‬‬ ‫‪L 3‬‬ ‫‪2M‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬
‫= ‪⇒ I‬‬ ‫‪[( D +‬‬ ‫‪) − (D −‬‬ ‫= ] )‬ ‫] ‪[3 D 2 ( ) + ( ) 3‬‬
‫‪3L‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3L‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2M L‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪L2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪[3 D 2 +‬‬ ‫= ]‪( )2‬‬ ‫‪(3 D 2 +‬‬ ‫‪) = M (D +‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‬
‫‪3L 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻭﻧﮕﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ g‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ g‬ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ T = 2π‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ DG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ g‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از راﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M g DG‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪) DG‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﮐﻞ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ( ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ M١‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ M٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ‪ M ٣‬ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ T‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ D٤‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ I‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻟﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪M١‬‬ ‫‪M١‬‬

‫‪M٢‬‬

‫‪M٣‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ )ﻭﺳﻂ( ‪ M i‬ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ= ‪D i‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ )ﻭﺳﻂ( ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ = ‪D٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﮐﻞ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ = ‪DG‬‬
‫‪M٢‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ = ‪M٤‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ= ‪L i‬‬
‫‪M٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ = ‪I‬‬

‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫]) ‪I = ∑ [ M i ( D i + i‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪i =1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫‪− M 1 D1 + M 2 D 2 + M 3 D 3 + M 4 D 4‬‬
‫= ‪DG‬‬
‫‪M1 + M 2 + M3 + M 4‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ ، T = 2π‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ T ٢‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ I‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M g DG‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪4π 2‬‬
‫( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ g‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ‪ g‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ =٩/٧٨ m/s ) .‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪(g‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ )‬
‫‪M gDG‬‬
‫‪ 4π‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‪⇒ g‬‬
‫‪M gDG‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆g = g − 9.78‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪∆g‬‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪9 . 78‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪D١ = D ٢ ١٠T‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Li‬‬
‫)‪D٣ (cm‬‬ ‫)‪T(s) T٢ (s٢‬‬ ‫‪I (kg m 2 ) = ∑ [M i ( D i +‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫])‬
‫‪i =1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫‪M١ = M٢ = M٣ = ١ /٥٦ kg‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪M٤ = ٠/٥٢٦ kg‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪L١=L٢ =L٣=٤cm=٠/٠٤m‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪L٤ = ٨٠ cm = ٠/٨ m‬‬
‫‪D٤ = ١٠ cm = ٠/١ m‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫= ‪DG‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﺵ(‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪ T = 2π‬در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ I‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ I‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از راﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M g DG‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ I‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎﺀ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ DG‬ﺑﻪﮐﻤﮏ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﺵ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫)‪D ١ (cm‬‬ ‫)‪D ٢ (cm‬‬ ‫)‪D ٣ (cm‬‬ ‫‪١٠T‬‬ ‫)‪T(s‬‬ ‫)‪T٢ (s٢‬‬ ‫)‪D G(cm‬‬ ‫)‪١/DG (١/m‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪ ، T = 2π‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ T ٢‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪DG‬‬ ‫‪M g DG‬‬
‫‪4π 2 I‬‬
‫( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ I‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ‪ I‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﺵ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ I‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ )‬
‫‪Mg‬‬
‫‪4π 2 I‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ I‬‬
‫‪Mg‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬
‫= ]) ‪ = ∑ [ M i ( D i + i‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪I‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪i =1‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬

‫= | ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪∆I = | I - I‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ‪) × ١٠٠ %‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ = (∆I / I‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ ، DG‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ ، I‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ، T = 2π l‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺁﻭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﮐﺐ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪g‬‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ )ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ X = at 2‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ‪ A‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ‪ B‬ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪2X‬‬
‫= ‪ V‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ X‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻭ ‪ t‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ B‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪− V 02 = 2 aX ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫{‬ ‫÷ ‪‬‬ ‫‪2X‬‬
‫= ‪ → V‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪V = at + V 0‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬

‫{‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ y‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ V٠‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪θ = ٠°‬‬
‫‪gx 2‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﭼﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ‪ x‬ﺑﻨﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ x‬ﻭ‪ y‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪2V02‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪y‬‬ ‫‪gt ‬‬ ‫‪1  x ‬‬ ‫‪gx 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪2  V 0 ‬‬ ‫‪2V 02‬‬
‫‪x = V 0 t ‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ )ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ( ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺲﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮒ( ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺁﻳﺮﻭﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﮑﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﺬﻭﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ a‬ﺷﺘﺎب ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰي روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪار‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ A‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ B‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻲ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ‪ ٣٠cm‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،B‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫)‪t(s‬‬ ‫)‪t²(s²‬‬ ‫)‪a (cm/s²‬‬ ‫‪a−a‬‬
‫)‪X(cm‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RESET‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ ، X = at 2‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ X‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪t²‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‪a‬‬ ‫=‪⇒a‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪∆a‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆a = a − a‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫ب‪ -‬اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰي در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪار‪:‬‬

‫‪2X‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ ٧٠cm‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ)‪X(cm‬‬ ‫)‪t(s‬‬ ‫= ) ‪V(cm / s‬‬ ‫‪V −V‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ A‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪∆V‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆V = V − V‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬
 ‫ج‪ -‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮﺗﺎب از ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪار‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﻭ ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪ y‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ )‪ A(٧٠cm‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﻨﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‪x ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪y‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٣‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ =٩٧٨ cm/s٢) .‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪(g‬‬

‫)‪y(cm) x(cm) x²(cm²) V0 (cm / s‬‬ ‫‪V0 − V0‬‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٣‬‬
‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪gx 2‬‬
‫(‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪،‬‬‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪2 V02‬‬ ‫‪2V02‬‬
‫‪ V0‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ V0‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ V0‬‬
‫‪2 V02‬‬
‫‪∆V 0‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆V0 = V0 − V0‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪V0‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ‪ X‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪) t²‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ (t‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪) x 2‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ ( x‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺏ( ﻭ )ﺝ( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ g‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪١٣‬‬
 ‫اﺻﻄﻜﺎك‬
‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﮐﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫‪fs,max = µs N‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ f k :1‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﻭ ‪ f s‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪fk = µk N‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ µ s ، µ k‬ﻭ ‪ N‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪fs ≤ µs N‬‬ ‫‪f s , max = µ s N‬‬ ‫‪fk=µk N‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪µ s>µk‬‬ ‫‪ µ k‬ﻭ ‪ µ s‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ" ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﺳﮑﻮﭘﻴﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻴﻘﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﮎ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ، m‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪fk‬‬ ‫‪mg‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫‪M‬‬ ‫= ‪ µ k‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪mg = f k‬‬ ‫‪mg = µ k N‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫‪Mg‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪) ⇒ ‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫‪⇒‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ mg = µ k (Mg) ⇒ µ k‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪N = Mg N = Mg‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ m‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ‬
‫‪α‬‬
‫‪m − M sinα‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫= ‪ µk‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M cosα‬‬
‫‪α‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫‪α‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪mg = fk + Mgsinα mg = µk N + Mgsinα‬‬ ‫‪m − M sinα‬‬
‫‪ ⇒ ‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪⇒‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ mg = µk (Mg cosα) + Mgsinα ⇒ µk‬‬
‫‪N = Mg cosα‬‬ ‫‪N = Mg cosα‬‬ ‫‪M cosα‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ M‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ α‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪α‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬

‫‪α‬‬ ‫‪ µ s = tg α‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪α‬‬
‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪ Mg sin α = f s‬‬ ‫‪ Mg sin α = µ s N‬‬
‫‪ ⇒ ‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪⇒‬‬ ‫‪⇒ Mg sin α = µ s Mg cos α ⇒ µ s = tg α‬‬
‫‪ N = Mg cos α‬‬ ‫‪ N = Mg cos α‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻄﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ)‪ (١‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻔﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﮔﺬﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻔﻪ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ ، f k < f s ,max‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺑﺮ ‪ f s ,max‬ﻏﻠﺒﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪M(g‬‬ ‫)‪m(g‬‬

‫)ﮐﻔﻪ ‪ +‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﺶ( )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ +‬ﺑﺎﺭ(‬ ‫= ‪µk‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪µk − µk‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫= ‪ ، µ k‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ m‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ M‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ µ k‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ µ k‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ µk‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪∆µ k‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆µ k = µ k − µ k‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× 100 %‬‬
‫‪µk‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ µ k‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪M(g‬‬ ‫)‪m(g‬‬
‫)ﮐﻔﻪ ‪ +‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﺶ( )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ +‬ﺑﺎﺭ(‬ ‫= ‪µk‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪µk − µk‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ µk‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪∆µ k‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆µ k = µ k − µ k‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪µk‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬
 ‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻴﺒﺪار ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻄﺢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ µ k ،(٣‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ µ k‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪m − M sin α‬‬
‫)‪M(g‬‬ ‫)‪m(g‬‬ ‫= ‪µk‬‬ ‫‪µk − µk‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫‪M cos α‬‬

‫‪ ٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٣‬‬
‫‪∆µ k‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆µ k = µ k − µ k‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪µk‬‬
‫ج‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ اﺻﻄﻜﺎك اﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺒﻮدن ﻛﻔﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ µ s = tgα‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ µ s‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪µs > µK‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٤‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )ﺍﻟﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ )ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻳﮑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ؟‬

‫‪١٦‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ g‬ﻭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂﮐﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﺺﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻨﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ x‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫→‬ ‫→‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻫﻮﮎ‬ ‫‪F = −k x‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ k‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺨﺖ )ﻧﺮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺨﺖ )ﻧﺮﻡ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﮐﺸﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﮑﻞﺗﺮ )ﺭﺍﺣﺖﺗﺮ( ﮐﺶ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪ a‬ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ(‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﻧﺮﻡ‪F = − k x + a x 3 :‬‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺳﺨﺖ‪F = − k x − a x 3 :‬‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ‪F = − k x :‬‬
‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪dyn‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪dyn‬‬
‫‪1 N = 105 dyn ,‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪= 103‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪، M.K.S.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ k‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪،C.G.S.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ، h = mx‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ k = gh‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪mg‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫= ‪f = kx ⇒ mg = kx ⇒ k‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ k‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪x/m‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ m e :3‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫=‬ ‫= ‪, dm = λ dy‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪dy :‬‬
‫‪V0 y 0‬‬ ‫‪y0‬‬

‫‪y٠‬‬
‫‪V٠‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪y0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 m‬‬ ‫‪1 y 2V m‬‬ ‫‪1 V m y3‬‬ ‫‪1 m‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪w = ∫ V 2 dm = ∫ V 2 dy = ∫ ( 20 ) dy = ( 0 3‬‬ ‫‪= ( )V 2 = meV 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2 y0‬‬ ‫‪2 y0 y0‬‬ ‫‪2 y0 3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪ T = 2π‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪d 2x‬‬ ‫‪d 2x k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪F = − kx ⇒ m‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪kx‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫= ‪x = 0 ⇒ ω2‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ω‬‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪⇒ T = 2π‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬
‫‪ 4π 2 h ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪T 2 = ‬‬ ‫‪ m‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ g ‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‪ T ٢‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ ،m‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1 1 1‬‬
‫‪= + +K‬‬ ‫‪T 2 = T12 + T22 + K‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪k k1 k 2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪k = k1 + k 2 + K‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ‪= 2 + 2 + K :‬‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪T1‬‬ ‫‪T2‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬اﻧﺪازهﮔﻴﺮي ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫‪m(g) x (m) k=mg/x‬‬ ‫‪k −k‬‬ ‫‪m(g) x (m) k=mg/x‬‬ ‫‪k −k‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪x ،‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٥٠‬‬
‫‪٣٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٥٠٠‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫= ‪ ، h‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ x‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ = ‪ k ، k‬ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ =٩/٧٨ N/kg) .‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪(g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫= ‪ h‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ‪):‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ(‬ ‫= =‪⇒k‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪∆k‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆k = k − k‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫= ‪ h‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ‪):‬ﻓﻨﺮ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ(‬ ‫= =‪⇒k‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪∆k‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆k = k − k‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ g‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻮﺳﺎن ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ T‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺮ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪ 4π 2 h ‬‬
‫‪، T 2 = ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ m‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫)‪T(s‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫)‪T(s‬‬ ‫‪ g ‬‬
‫‪١٠Т‬‬ ‫‪T٢‬‬ ‫‪١٠Т‬‬ ‫‪T٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ T٢‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ‪ m‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬ ‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬ ‫‪4π 2 h‬‬
‫( ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ )‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ =‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ g‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﻨﺮ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ‬
‫‪ ٣٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪g‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬
 ‫‪4π 2 h‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‪⇒g‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪∆g‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆g‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ج‪ -‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ رواﺑﻂ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﺮي و ﻣﻮازي‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ‪ ٣٥٠‬ﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ x ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ F = - k x‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ‪٣٥٠‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ T‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٣‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫)‪m(g‬‬ ‫‪F = mg‬‬ ‫)‪x (m‬‬ ‫‪k=F/x‬‬ ‫‪١٠T‬‬ ‫)‪T(s‬‬ ‫‪T٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 ? 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫⇒ ‪k = k + k‬‬
‫‪: ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ 2‬‬ ‫?‬

‫⇒ ‪T = T1 + T2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪‬‬ ‫?‬

‫‪‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫⇒ ‪k1 + k 2‬‬

‫‪:  1 ? 1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫⇒ ‪ 2= 2 + 2‬‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪T1‬‬ ‫‪T2‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻨﺮ ) ‪ ، ( E = k x 2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻨﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
 ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﮔﺮاﻧﺮوي( ﺳﻴﺎﻻت‬
‫ﻫﺪف‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ )ﮔﺮﺍﻧ ‪‬ﺮﻭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﮔﻠﻴﺴﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺷﻴﺸﻪﺍﻱ ‪،‬ﮔﻠﻴﺴﺮﻳﻦ ‪،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )ﺳﺎﭼﻤﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪،‬ﮐﻮﻟﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ )ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ( ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺸﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ (eta ) η :2‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ M.K.S.‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ N 2s‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ C.G.S.‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ Poise‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫) ‪ (١ Poise = ١ dyn _2 s‬ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ M L-١T-١‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪cm‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺴﻞ ﮐﻪﮔﺮﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ η ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﺮﻭﻱ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ η ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ r‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ‪ Ff r ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺷﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎﻝ( ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ‪ r‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ v ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪ η‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ Ff r .‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Ff r = k η x r y v z‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ k‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺴﻴﻮﻥ ﮐﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﻭ ‪ z‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫] [‬
‫‪ F fr = MLT − 2‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪x = 1‬‬ ‫‪x = 1‬‬
‫‪[η ] = ML −1T −1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪⇒ MLT‬‬ ‫‪−2‬‬
‫‪=M‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫‪L− X T‬‬ ‫‪−X‬‬
‫‪L y LZ T‬‬ ‫‪−Z‬‬
‫‪⇒  − x + y + z = 1 ⇒  y = 1 ⇒ F fr = k η r v‬‬
‫‪[r ] = L‬‬ ‫‪ − x − z = −2‬‬ ‫‪z = 1‬‬
‫‪[v ] = LT −1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ١٨٥٠‬ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﮐﺲ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ k‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ٦π‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﮐﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ )‪ (Laminar flow‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ‪ η‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﮐﺲ‪Ff r = ٦π η r v :‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ r‬ﻭ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ρ‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ '‪ ρ‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﮐﺲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ‪ Ff r ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪ( ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ‪ h‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ t‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ v‬ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪D 2t (ρ − ρ ′ ) g‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬
‫=‪η‬‬ ‫= ‪ . v‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ‪ η ، D = ٢ r‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪18h‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪2 r2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫= ‪F fr = ρ vg − ρ ′ vg ⇒ 6 π η r v = (ρ − ρ ′ ) π r 3  g ⇒ η‬‬ ‫‪g (ρ − ρ ′ )‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪9 v‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪D 2 t ( ρ − ρ ′) g‬‬
‫= ‪⇒ η‬‬
‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪18 h‬‬
‫= ‪v‬‬ ‫‪, D = 2r‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﮐﻮﻟﻴﺲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻮﻟﻴﺲ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ )ﻭِﺭﻧﻴﻪ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﹰﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮﻗﺴﻤﺖﻣﺘﺤﺮﮎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻮﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻠﻴﺴﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ XY=١٠٠cm‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ AY=٥٠cm‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،X‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫)‪D(cm‬‬ ‫)‪h(cm‬‬ ‫)‪t(s‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‬ ‫‪v= h / t‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻏﻤﺎﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﮔﺮاﻧﺮوي(‪:‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪ D(cm) t(s‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬ ‫)‪D²(cm²‬‬ ‫‪١/t‬‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫=)‪ ρ(g/cm³‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪،‬‬
‫=)‪ ρ'(g/cm³‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﮔﻠﻴﺴﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪XY = h(cm)= ١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫= ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ =٩٧٨ cm/s‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪g‬‬ ‫‪XY=١٠٠cm‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫= ‪ D²t‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪D2‬‬
‫( ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪η ،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ D²‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ) ‪= D 2 t‬‬
‫) ‪(1 / t‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ‪ Poise‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ C.G.S.‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ η‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫‪D 2 t ( ρ − ρ ′) g‬‬
‫= ‪D 2t‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒η‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪18 h‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪∆η‬‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪η‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﻳﺴﮑﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﮔﻠﻴﺴﺮﻳﻦ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫ﭼﺮخ ﻣﺎﻛﺴﻮل‬

‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ a‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﭼﺮﺥ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭼﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﺰﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺩﻭﮐﻔﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ I :1‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺮﺧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ h‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ t‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ‪r‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪ I ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ I = m r 2 ( − 1) = mρ 2‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ ρ‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﮊﻳﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫= ‪mgh‬‬ ‫‪mV 2 + Iω 2 ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1 2 ah‬‬ ‫‪r2‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ω = 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪ ⇒ mgh = m ( 2 ah ) + I ( 2 ) ⇒ I‬‬ ‫)‪( mgh − mah ) ⇒ I = mr 2 ( − 1‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪ah‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪V = 2 ah‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ a :2‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ g‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ h = a t 2‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ α‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ α‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺥ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 2mV‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭼﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﮑﻮﻥ ﭼﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ I‬ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ‪ I = ∫ r 2 dm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺭﻳﺰﺳﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺰﺳﻨﺞ ﻧﻌﻠﻲ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﮏ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺒﻠﮏ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﺳﻨﺞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺒﻠﮏ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺒﻠﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﻔﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﺒﻠﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ ٠/٥٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﭼﺮخ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻔﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﻣﭙﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻣﻲﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲﺯﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻔﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﭼﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺘﺎب ﺧﻄﻲ و اﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ دوراﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻳﺰﺳﻨﺞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣ ﹰ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪h(cm‬‬ ‫)‪t(s‬‬ ‫)‪t٢(s٢‬‬ ‫)‪a (cm/s²‬‬ ‫)‪I (g cm²‬‬ ‫‪I − I‬‬ ‫=‪h‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪a t‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ h‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ t٢‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫‪m(g)=١٢٠٠‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪I‬‬
‫‪ =٩٧٨cm/s٢‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪g‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪ ρ‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬

‫=)‪r(cm‬‬ ‫ﮊﻳﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ I‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‪a‬‬ ‫=‪⇒a‬‬ ‫=‪⇒I‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫= ‪I = mρ2 ⇒ ρ‬‬
‫‪∆I‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆I = I − I‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ r -1‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ I‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﻴﻔﯽ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد‬
‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ e‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂﮐﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ‪ E ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪m 1V1 + m 2 V 2 − E = m 1 V1′ 2 + m 2 V 2′‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﮐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﮏ( ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﮐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﮏ( ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪V2′ − V1′‬‬
‫‪ e = −‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (V٢-V١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ e :2‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪V2 − V1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ )‪ (V'٢-V'١‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ e‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪0 ≤ e ≤ 1 .‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ ‪ e =١‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ" ﻧﺎﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ ‪ e = ٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫⇒ ‪Fext = 0‬‬
‫‪dP‬‬
‫⇒ ‪= 0 ⇒ P = const‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪m1V1 + m2V2 + L = m1V1′ + m2V ′ 2+L :‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺮﺑﻪﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ m١‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ١‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ‪ m ٢‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ‪ θo‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ‪ m١‬ﻭ ‪ m ٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ‪ θ'١‬ﻭ ‪ θ'٢‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪V1‬‬ ‫) ‪2 R g (cos θ 0 − cos θ 1‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻮﻱ ‪ m١‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪V2 = 0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻮﻱ ‪ m ٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫)‪V1′ = 2 R g (cos θ 0 − cos θ ′ 1‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻮﻱ ‪ m١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪V 2′‬‬ ‫) ‪2 R g ( 1 − cos θ ′ 2‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﮔﻮﻱ ‪ m ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (١‬ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪E1 = m1 gh = m1 g ( R − R cos θ 1 ) = m1 gR (1 − cos θ 1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫⇒‪‬‬
‫‪E 2 = m1V12 + m1 g ( R−R cos θ 0 ) = m1V12 +m1 gR (1−cos θ 0 ) ‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪⇒ m1 gR (1−cos θ 1 ) = m1V12 + m1 gR (1−cos θ 0 ) ⇒ V1 = 2 Rg (cosθ 0− cos θ 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪m2 :‬‬ ‫) ‪m2V2′ 2 = m2 g ( R − R cosθ 2′ ) ⇒ V2′ = 2 Rg (1 − cosθ 2′‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪m1 :‬‬ ‫)‪m1V1′ 2 + m1 g ( R − R cosθ 0 ) = m1 g ( R − R cosθ1′) ⇒ V1′ = 2 Rg (cosθ 0 − cosθ1′‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬

‫‪θ١‬‬
‫‪θ'٢‬‬
‫‪θ'١‬‬

‫‪θo‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ R ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ‪ θo‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻱ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﮔﻮﻱ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ ﮔﻮﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ‪θ'١ ،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ m١‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ θ'٢‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‪ m٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪θ١‬‬ ‫‪θ'١‬‬ ‫‪θ'٢‬‬ ‫‪V١‬‬ ‫‪V'١‬‬ ‫‪V'٢‬‬ ‫‪V'٢ -V'١‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪e−e‬‬
‫‪m١=٢٨٠ g‬‬ ‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪m٢=١٧٠ g‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫=‪R‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪=٩٧٨ cm2‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪g‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫=‪θo‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ ، (V2′ − V1′) = eV1‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ )‪ (V2′ − V1′‬ﺑﻪ ‪ V1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‪e ،‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ e‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(V'٢-V'١‬‬

‫)‪(V2′ − V1′‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‪⇒ e‬‬
‫‪V1‬‬ ‫‪V1‬‬

‫‪∆e‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆e = e − e‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪e‬‬

‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻨﹰﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪ ، m1 g sin θ 0‬ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪m1V1 + m2V2 = m1V1′ + m2V ′ 2‬‬ ‫⇒‬

‫‪m1V1 + m2V2 = m1V1′ + m2V ′ 2‬‬ ‫⇒‬

‫‪m1V1 + m2V2 = m1V1′ + m2V ′ 2‬‬ ‫⇒‬

‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ‪ e‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ θ١‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ m١‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺎﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ" ﻧﺎﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪e‬‬
‫ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ e‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﺑﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬ﻣﺎرﻳﻮت‬

‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﺭﻳﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻭﻣﺘﺮ )ﺟ‪‬ﻮﺳﻨﺞ(‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ )ﮐﺎﻣﻞ( ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ )ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪n2a‬‬
‫‪(P +‬‬ ‫‪)( V − nb) = n R T‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﻧﺪﺭﻭﺍﻟﺲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪V2‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻧﺪﺭﻭﺍﻟﺲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪PV = n RT :‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﺭﻳﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ P ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫⇒ ‪PV = n R T‬‬ ‫) ‪p = ( n RT‬‬ ‫‪V‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ‪ K‬ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪123 V‬‬
‫‪K‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎ‪ ٧٦ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ ١ cm 2‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ P‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﮑﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ h‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‪ ،P‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫= ‪P = ρ gh ⇔ h‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ‪ρ) .‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ(‬
‫‪ρg‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ h‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﻭ ‪ L‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ ρ‬ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ r ،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬ ‫(=‪h‬‬ ‫‪) − h0‬‬ ‫‪ h‬ﻭ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪ρgπ r L‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﻭ ‪ h0‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫= ‪PV = nRT = K ⇒ P‬‬
‫‪V ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪P = ρ g ( h + h0‬‬ ‫= ) ‪ ⇒ ρ g ( h + h0‬‬ ‫= ‪⇒ h + h0‬‬ ‫(=‪⇒ h‬‬ ‫‪) − h0‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪πr L‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ρgπ r L‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ρgπ r L‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪V = π r2L‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ h ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‪ h ،‬ﻭ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪h‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‪ L‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮑﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ‪ h‬ﻭ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪ h‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ h‬ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫)‪h(cm-Hg‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‬
‫)‪L(cm‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬
‫‪1 1 ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪L  cm ‬‬

‫) ‪K (J‬‬

‫‪K−K‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ‬ ‫( = ‪ ، h‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ h‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪) − h0‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪ρ gπ r L‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪K‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ K‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ K‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ،C.G.S.‬ﺍِﺭﮒ )‪(erg‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻳﻞ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﺭﻳﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫‪ρgπ r2‬‬
‫) ‪(١ J =١٠٧ erg‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ، M.K.S.‬ﮊﻭﻝ)‪ ( J‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ h0‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪=١٣/٦ g/cm٣‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ‪ρ‬‬ ‫‪ = ٩٧٨ cm/s٢‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ‪g‬‬ ‫‪ r =٠/٧cm‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ) ‪⇒ K (J‬‬
‫‪ρgπ r2‬‬
‫= ‪| h0‬ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ|‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ K‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆K‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆K = K − K‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟ‪‬ﻮﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪، PV = n R T = K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪ (R=٨/٣١‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ )‪ n ،K(J‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪ R ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ )‬
‫‪mol.K‬‬
‫‪ T‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮐﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ N‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ n‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺁﻭﻭﮔﺎﺩﺭﻭ )‪ (٦/٠٢×١٠٢٣‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪ (٢٧/٩٧‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ n‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ )‬
‫‪mol‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ h0‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺟ‪‬ﻮﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ h0‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ N‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺟﺮﻡ‬

‫)ﮐﻠﻮﻳﻦ(‪T‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟ‪‬ﻮﺳﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬

‫‪TEMPRATURE‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬

‫‪°CELSIUS‬‬

‫= ‪N‬‬
‫= ‪n RT = K ⇒ n‬‬ ‫‪⇒‬‬
‫= ‪m‬‬
‫‪∆h0‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆h0‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪h0‬‬

‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ K‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ؟ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ؟‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ h‬ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬
 ‫ﻛﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﺯﻭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺒﺮ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺲ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ C ، Q = m C ∆θ‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪cal‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ )‪ ( mC‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪،C.G.S.‬‬
‫‪g oc‬‬
‫‪cal‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(١ cal = ٤/٢ J) .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﮐﻞ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺵ‬
‫‪oc‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ )ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ( ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺎﻳﻖﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﺁﻥ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ)‪ (mC‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ A‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪١cal/g°c‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲﺁﻥ ‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ A‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ θe‬ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ = ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫… ‪m١C١ (θ e - θ١) + m٢C٢ (θ e - θ١) + ... = m'١C'١(θ'١ - θ e) + m'٢C'٢(θ'١ - θ e) +‬‬
‫)‪(m١C١ + m٢C٢ + …) (θ e - θ١) = (m'١C'١ + m'٢C'٢ + …) (θ'١ - θ e‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺱ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﮐﺸﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪dQ‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ s‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻭ ‪k‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ) ‪= ks (θ − θ1‬‬
‫‪dt‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪Q = ∫ ks(θ −θ1 )dt =ks∫ (θ −θ1 )dt = ks(S1 ) = ks(S2 ) :‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ A‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٥٠cc‬ﺁﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٥٠cc‬ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺮﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺸﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻬﻢﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺍﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ t(s‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪٠‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠ ٣٠ ٤٠ ٥٠ ٦٠ ٧٠ ٨٠ ٩٠ ١٠٠ ١١٠ ١٢٠ ١٣٠ ٠٠٠‬‬

‫)‪ θ(°c‬ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ) ‪ A ، ( A + m1 C )(θ e − θ 1 ) = m 2 C (θ 2 − θ e‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٢‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪cal‬‬
‫)‪m١(g‬‬ ‫(‪C‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪θ١(°c‬‬ ‫)‪θ٢(°c‬‬ ‫)‪m٢(g‬‬ ‫‪cal‬‬
‫‪g oc‬‬ ‫)‪θ e (°c‬‬ ‫(‪A‬‬ ‫)‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫‪oc‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺁﺏ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٢‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫= ‪( A + m1 C )(θ e − θ 1 ) = m 2 C (θ 2 − θ e ) ⇒ A‬‬

‫‪θ١‬‬
‫‪t‬‬

‫‪ ∆m2 ∆C ∆θ 2 + ∆θ e ∆θ e + ∆θ1 ‬‬

‫‪ ∆A = ( A + m1C )‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫= ‪ + C ∆m1 + m1∆C‬‬
‫‪ m2‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪θ2 − θe‬‬ ‫‪θ e − θ1 ‬‬
‫‪∆A‬‬
‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
 ‫ب‪ -‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ وﻳﮋه ﻓﻠﺰات‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﭘﻨﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٢٥ cc‬ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﻳﺰﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻨﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻏﻮﻃﻪﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﻢﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻠﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ t(s‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪٠‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠ ٣٠ ٤٠ ٥٠ ٦٠ ٧٠ ٨٠ ٩٠ ١٠٠ ١١٠ ١٢٠ ١٣٠ ٠٠٠‬‬

‫)‪ θ(°c‬ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ) ‪ C٢ ، ( A + m1 C 1 )(θ e − θ 1 ) = m 2 C 2 (θ 2 − θ e‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻠﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (٤‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ C٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪cal‬‬
‫)‪m١(g‬‬ ‫( ‪C1‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪θ١(°c‬‬ ‫)‪m٢(g‬‬ ‫)‪θ٢(°c‬‬ ‫)‪θ e (°c‬‬ ‫‪cal‬‬
‫‪g oc‬‬ ‫( ‪C2‬‬ ‫)‬
‫ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪g oc‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻠﺰ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺁﺏ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(٤‬‬

‫‪θ‬‬ ‫= ‪( A + m 1 C 1 )(θ e − θ 1 ) = m 2 C 2 (θ 2 − θ e ) ⇒ C 2‬‬

‫‪ ∆A + C1 ∆m1 + m1∆C1 ∆θ e + ∆θ1 ∆m2 ∆θ 2 + ∆θ e‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ∆C 2 = C 2 ‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫= ‪‬‬
‫‪θ١‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪−‬‬ ‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪θ2 − θe‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪∆C 2‬‬
‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﺪﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻟﺮﻳﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﻭﺯﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻠﻪ ﮐﻮﻩ؟‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬
 ‫اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ β‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‪ ، ABC‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ β ، ∆V = V0 β ∆θ‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁﺣﺠﻤﻲﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ ∆V‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ‪ ∆θ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫‪1 ∆V‬‬
‫=‪β‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ Vo‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪V0 ∆θ‬‬

‫‪∆V‬‬
‫‪Vo‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ‪ Vo‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:2‬‬
‫‪∆θ‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺭﻝ‪-‬ﮔﻴﻠﻮﺳﺎﮎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﮐﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ PV = n R T‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪β‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ )ﮐﺎﻣﻞ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪273‬‬
‫‪PV‬‬ ‫‪V nR‬‬ ‫‪V V0‬‬ ‫‪∆V V0 ‬‬
‫⇒ ‪= nR‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫⇒ ‪= cte‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫⇒‬ ‫=‬
‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪T T0‬‬ ‫‪∆T T0 ‬‬ ‫‪1 V0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪⇒ β‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪⇒ β‬‬ ‫اﺛﺒﺎت‪:‬‬
‫‪1 ∆V‬‬ ‫‪1 ∆V‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫‪273‬‬
‫=‪β‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪V0 ∆θ V0 ∆T‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ )ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺼﻒ( ﺁﺏ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ‪ AB‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺟﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ)‪ (AB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﻣﻲﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ L ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺴﻄﺢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ r = ٠/٧ cm) .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ(‬

‫)‪ θ (°c‬ﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪٩٠‬‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬

‫)‪L(cm‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬
‫‪V (cm 3 ) = π r 2 L‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪∆V‬‬ ‫‪1 ∆V‬‬
‫= ‪ ، β‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪V‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻪ ‪ θ‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﻴﺐﺧﻂ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪∆θ‬‬ ‫‪V0 ∆ θ‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪) V0‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ(‪ β ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ β‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆V‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪ V0‬ﻋﺮﺽﺍﺯﻣﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫‪∆θ‬‬
‫‪θ‬‬ ‫‪1 ∆V‬‬
‫=‪β‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪V 0 ∆θ‬‬
‫‪∆β‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆β‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪β‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫ﻼ ‪ ٢ cm‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ؟‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ‪ ، L‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ‪ Vo‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻳﻢ؟‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
 ‫اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﺪات‬

‫ﻫﺪف آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ α‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ‬

‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮي از ﺗﺌﻮري‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :1‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ∆L‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ ∆θ‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ‪ L 0‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ α ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫‪1 ∆L‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫⇒ ‪∆L = L 0α ∆θ‬‬ ‫=‪α‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺵ ) ‪ ( 0‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪L 0 ∆θ‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:2‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺘﺎﻧﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﻼ‬ ‫ﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺞ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﺏ‬
‫) ‪α(١/°C‬‬ ‫‪٨/٦×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪١١/٧٦×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪١٤/٢×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪١٦/٦×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪١٨/٦٢×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪١٩×١٠-٦‬‬ ‫‪٢٨/٣×١٠-٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺁﻥ ‪ ٠/٠١‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :4‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺴﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻠﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﻟﮑﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ" ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺭﻗﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻊﺷﮑﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮﺩ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :5‬ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺞ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﭺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑﺮﻧﺞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺧﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
 ‫اﺟﺮاي آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﻲ)ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺼﻒ(‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮﺵ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪ‪ ∆L ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ∆L ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻳﻦﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪ (١‬ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫)‪ θ (°c‬ﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪٩٠‬‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫‪٧٠‬‬ ‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫= ‪θ0‬‬ ‫‪∆θ = θ − θ0‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫)‪∆L(mm‬‬
‫‪L 0 = 600 mm‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )‪(١‬‬
‫‪1 ∆L‬‬
‫= ‪ ، α‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ∆L‬ﺑﻪ ‪ ∆θ‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪L 0 ∆θ‬‬
‫‪ α‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ‪ α‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆L‬‬ ‫‪∆L‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ‬ ‫=‬
‫‪∆θ‬‬
‫‪1 ∆L‬‬
‫‪∆θ‬‬ ‫=‪α‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪L 0 ∆θ‬‬
‫‪∆α‬‬
‫= ‪ ∆α‬ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬ ‫= ‪× ١٠٠ %‬‬
‫‪α‬‬
‫اﺷﺎره ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮي‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺆاﻻت‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ α ،‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﮑﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ‪ α‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺤﮑﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ‪ α‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ -3‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪول ﺗﻨﺎوﺑﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪول ﻟﻐﺎت‬

amplitude ‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ‬ experiment ‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‬

calibration ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬ laboratory ‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ‬
thermometer ‫ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ‬ remote lab ‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
ambient temperature ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ virtual lab ‫ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ‬
oscillation period ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ‬ trial and error ‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
method of least squares ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ pendulum ‫ﺁﻭﻧﮓ‬
hardness ‫ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬ significant digits ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬
initial velocity ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬ static friction ‫ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ‬
instantaneous velocity ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ‬ kinetic friction ‫ﺍﺻﻄﮑﺎﮎ ﺟﻨﺒﺸﻲ‬
inclined plane ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ‬ cubical expansion ‫ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺠﻤﻲ‬
acceleration ‫ﺷﺘﺎﺏ‬ linear expansion ‫ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
standard conditions ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ‬ rotational inertia ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬
radius ‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ‬ vapor ‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬
coefficient of restitution ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ inelastic collision ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﮐﺸﺴﺎﻥ‬
heat capacity ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬ momentum conservation ‫ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
angular frequency ‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪﺍﻱ‬ data processing ‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‬
manometer ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺳﻨﺞ‬ equilibrium ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
air pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ effective mass ‫ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
reading ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ‬ barometer ‫ﻮﺳﻨﺞ‬‫ﺟ‬
pulley ‫ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ‬ mercury ‫ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‬
graph paper ‫ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺷﻄﺮﻧﺠﻲ‬ density ‫ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ‬
stop-watch ‫ﮐﺮﻭﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ volume ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
extension of spring ‫ﮐﺸﺶ ﻓﻨﺮ‬ elastic limit ‫ﺣﺪ ﮐﺸﺴﺎﻧﻲ‬
ideal gas ‫ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ‬ projectile motion ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻪ‬
real gas ‫ﮔﺎﺯ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ rotational motion ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ‬
heater ‫ﮔﺮﻣﮑﻦ‬ uniform motion ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ‬
torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬ sensor ‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ‬
center of gravity ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ‬ absolute error ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬
empirical value ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ‬ average error ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ‬
boiling point ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ‬ relative error ‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬
dynamometer ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺳﻨﺞ‬ line of regression ‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
weight ‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬ vacuum ‫ﺧﻼﺀ‬

٣٨